Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 29700:1e88ad071a1a
(make_shadow_gcs): Set free_top_shadow_color_p
and free_top_shadow_color_p flags in the menu widget if
top and bottom shadow colors must be freed.
(release_shadow_gcs): Free colors only if they must be freed.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Fri, 16 Jun 2000 18:34:17 +0000 |
parents | 5d67ef29764b |
children | 171ba59e1cb0 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
29437 | 103 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
104 #include <term.h> /* for tgetent */ | |
105 #endif | |
25012 | 106 |
107 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
108 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
109 | |
110 struct dim | |
111 { | |
112 int width; | |
113 int height; | |
114 }; | |
115 | |
116 | |
117 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
118 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
119 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
120 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 121 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
122 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
123 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
124 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
125 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
126 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
127 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
128 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
129 struct dim)); | |
130 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
131 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
132 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
133 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
134 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
135 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
136 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 137 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
138 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
139 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
140 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
141 struct window *)); | |
142 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
143 struct window *)); | |
144 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
145 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
146 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
147 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
148 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
149 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
150 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
151 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
152 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
153 int, int)); | |
154 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
155 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
156 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
157 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 158 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
159 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 160 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
161 int)); | |
162 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
163 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
164 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 165 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
166 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
167 #endif |
25012 | 168 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
169 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
170 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
171 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
172 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
173 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
174 struct glyph_row *)); | |
175 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
176 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
177 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
178 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
179 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
180 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 181 |
182 | |
183 | |
184 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
185 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
186 scrolling. */ | |
187 | |
188 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
189 |
554 | 190 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 191 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 192 |
764 | 193 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 194 |
25012 | 195 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 196 |
197 int display_completed; | |
198 | |
25012 | 199 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
200 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 201 |
202 int visible_bell; | |
203 | |
764 | 204 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 205 |
206 int inverse_video; | |
207 | |
208 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
209 | |
210 int baud_rate; | |
211 | |
25012 | 212 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
213 is running. */ | |
314 | 214 |
215 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
216 | |
217 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 218 |
314 | 219 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
220 | |
25012 | 221 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
222 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 223 |
224 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 225 as a character code. |
226 | |
227 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
228 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 229 |
230 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
231 | |
232 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
233 | |
234 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
235 | |
25012 | 236 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
237 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
238 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
239 | |
314 | 240 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
241 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
242 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 243 |
314 | 244 |
25012 | 245 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
246 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
247 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
248 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 249 |
250 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 251 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 252 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
253 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 254 |
255 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
256 | |
257 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
258 | |
259 FILE *termscript; | |
260 | |
261 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
262 | |
263 struct cm Wcm; | |
264 | |
265 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
266 | |
267 int delayed_size_change; | |
268 | |
269 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
270 | |
271 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
272 | |
273 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
274 | |
275 struct window *updated_window; | |
276 | |
277 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
278 | |
279 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
280 int updated_area; | |
281 | |
282 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
283 | |
284 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
285 | |
286 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
287 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
288 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
289 | |
290 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
291 | |
292 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
293 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
294 | |
295 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
296 int glyph_pool_count; | |
297 | |
298 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
299 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
300 | |
301 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
302 | |
303 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
304 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
305 | |
306 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
307 | |
308 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
309 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
310 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
311 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
312 loaded on demand. */ | |
313 | |
314 int fonts_changed_p; | |
315 | |
316 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
317 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
318 | |
319 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
320 | |
321 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
322 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
323 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
324 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
325 | |
326 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
327 | |
328 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
329 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
330 | |
331 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
332 | |
333 | |
334 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
335 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
336 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 337 |
338 void | |
339 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
340 char *from, *to; | |
341 int size; | |
342 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 344 return; |
345 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
346 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
347 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 else |
314 | 354 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
355 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
356 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 357 |
358 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
359 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
360 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
361 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
362 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
363 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 364 if (to - from < 64) |
365 { | |
366 do | |
367 *--endt = *--endf; | |
368 while (endf != from); | |
369 } | |
370 else | |
371 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
372 for (;;) |
314 | 373 { |
374 endt -= (to - from); | |
375 endf -= (to - from); | |
376 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
377 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
378 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
379 |
314 | 380 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
381 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
382 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
383 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 384 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
385 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 386 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
387 } | |
388 } | |
389 } | |
390 | |
25012 | 391 |
392 | |
393 /*********************************************************************** | |
394 Glyph Matrices | |
395 ***********************************************************************/ | |
396 | |
397 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
398 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
399 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
400 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
401 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
402 | |
403 struct glyph_matrix * | |
404 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
405 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
406 { | |
407 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
408 | |
409 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
410 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
411 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
412 | |
413 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
414 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
415 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
416 | |
417 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
418 result->pool = pool; | |
419 return result; | |
420 } | |
421 | |
422 | |
423 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
424 | |
425 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
426 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
427 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
428 pointer was passed to this function. | |
429 | |
430 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
431 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
432 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
433 | |
434 static void | |
435 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
436 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
437 { | |
438 if (matrix) | |
439 { | |
440 int i; | |
441 | |
442 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
443 allocated. */ | |
444 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
445 abort (); | |
446 | |
447 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
448 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
449 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
450 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
451 | |
452 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
453 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
454 xfree (matrix); | |
455 } | |
456 } | |
457 | |
458 | |
459 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
460 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
461 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
462 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
463 or a float. */ | |
464 | |
465 static int | |
466 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
467 struct window *w; | |
468 int total_glyphs; | |
469 Lisp_Object margin; | |
470 { | |
471 int n; | |
472 | |
473 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
474 { | |
475 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
476 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
477 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
478 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
479 } | |
480 else | |
481 n = 0; | |
482 | |
483 return n; | |
484 } | |
485 | |
486 | |
487 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
488 window sizes. | |
489 | |
490 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
491 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
492 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
493 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
494 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
495 | |
496 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
497 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
498 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
499 MATRIX->pool. | |
500 | |
501 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
502 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
503 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
504 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
505 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
506 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
507 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
508 | |
509 static void | |
510 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
511 struct window *w; | |
512 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
513 int x, y; | |
514 struct dim dim; | |
515 { | |
516 int i; | |
517 int new_rows; | |
518 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 519 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
520 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 521 int left = -1, right = -1; |
522 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
523 | |
524 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
525 if (w) | |
526 { | |
25546 | 527 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
528 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 529 } |
25546 | 530 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 531 |
532 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
533 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
534 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
535 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
536 { | |
537 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
538 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
539 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
540 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
541 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
542 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
543 | |
544 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
545 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 546 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 547 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
548 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
549 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
550 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
551 return; | |
552 } | |
553 | |
554 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
555 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
556 { | |
557 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
558 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
559 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
560 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
561 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
562 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
563 } | |
564 else | |
565 new_rows = 0; | |
566 | |
567 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
568 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
569 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
570 if (matrix->pool) | |
571 { | |
572 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
573 | |
574 if (w) | |
575 { | |
576 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
577 w->left_margin_width); | |
578 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
579 w->right_margin_width); | |
580 } | |
581 else | |
582 left = right = 0; | |
583 | |
584 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
585 { | |
586 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
587 | |
588 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
589 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
590 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
591 + x); | |
592 | |
593 if (w == NULL | |
594 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 595 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 596 { |
597 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
598 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
599 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
600 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
601 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
602 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
603 } | |
604 else | |
605 { | |
606 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
607 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
608 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
609 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
610 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
611 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
612 } | |
613 } | |
614 | |
615 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
616 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
617 } | |
618 else | |
619 { | |
620 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
621 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
622 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
623 || new_rows | |
25546 | 624 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 625 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
626 { | |
627 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
628 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
629 | |
630 while (row < end) | |
631 { | |
632 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
633 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
634 (dim.width | |
635 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
636 | |
637 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
638 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 639 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 640 { |
641 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
642 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
643 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
644 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
645 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
646 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
647 } | |
648 else | |
649 { | |
650 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
651 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
652 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
653 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
654 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
655 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
656 } | |
657 ++row; | |
658 } | |
659 } | |
660 | |
661 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
662 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
663 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
664 } | |
665 | |
666 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
667 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
668 | |
669 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
670 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
671 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
672 when this function runs. */ | |
673 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
674 { | |
675 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
676 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
677 of the window. */ | |
678 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
679 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
680 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
681 { | |
682 i = 0; | |
683 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
684 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
685 < matrix->window_height)) | |
686 ++i; | |
687 | |
688 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
689 are invalidated. */ | |
690 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
691 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
692 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
693 | |
694 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
695 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
696 } | |
697 else | |
698 { | |
699 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
700 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
701 } | |
702 } | |
703 | |
704 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
705 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
706 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
707 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
708 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
709 | |
710 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
711 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
712 if (w) | |
713 { | |
714 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
715 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
716 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
717 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
718 } | |
719 } | |
720 | |
721 | |
722 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
723 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
724 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
725 below). */ | |
314 | 726 |
727 static void | |
25012 | 728 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
729 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
730 int start, end; | |
314 | 731 { |
25012 | 732 int i, j; |
733 | |
734 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
735 { | |
736 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
737 initialization. */ | |
738 struct glyph_row temp; | |
739 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
740 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
741 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
742 } | |
314 | 743 } |
744 | |
25012 | 745 |
746 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
747 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
748 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
749 row structures are moved around). | |
750 | |
751 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
752 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
753 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
754 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
755 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
756 rotating right. */ | |
757 | |
758 void | |
759 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
760 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
761 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 762 { |
25012 | 763 if (by < 0) |
764 { | |
765 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
766 by = -by; | |
767 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
768 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
769 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
770 } | |
771 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 772 { |
25012 | 773 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
774 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
775 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
776 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 777 } |
25012 | 778 } |
779 | |
780 | |
781 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
782 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
783 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
784 | |
785 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
786 increment_matrix_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 787 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; |
788 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
789 { | |
790 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
791 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
792 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
793 xassert (start <= end); | |
794 | |
795 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
796 increment_row_positions (matrix->rows + start, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 797 } |
798 | |
799 | |
800 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
801 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
802 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
803 | |
804 void | |
805 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
806 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
807 int start, end; | |
808 int enabled_p; | |
809 { | |
810 xassert (start <= end); | |
811 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
812 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
813 | |
814 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
815 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
816 } | |
817 | |
818 | |
819 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
820 | |
821 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
822 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
823 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
824 enabled_p flag. | |
825 | |
826 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
827 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
828 | |
829 void | |
830 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
831 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
832 { | |
833 if (matrix) | |
314 | 834 { |
25012 | 835 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
836 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 837 } |
838 } | |
25012 | 839 |
840 | |
841 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
842 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
843 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
844 | |
845 void | |
846 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
847 struct window *w; | |
848 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
849 int start, end, dy; | |
850 { | |
851 int min_y, max_y; | |
852 | |
853 xassert (start <= end); | |
854 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
855 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
856 | |
25546 | 857 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 858 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
859 | |
860 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
861 { | |
862 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
863 | |
864 row->y += dy; | |
865 | |
866 if (row->y < min_y) | |
867 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
868 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
869 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
870 else | |
871 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
872 } | |
873 } | |
874 | |
875 | |
876 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
877 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
878 current matrix. */ | |
879 | |
880 void | |
881 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
882 register struct frame *f; | |
883 { | |
884 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
885 if (f->current_matrix) | |
886 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
887 | |
888 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
889 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
890 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
891 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
892 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
893 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
894 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
895 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
896 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 897 |
898 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
899 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
900 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
901 } | |
902 | |
903 | |
904 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 905 |
21514 | 906 void |
25012 | 907 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
908 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 909 { |
25012 | 910 if (f->desired_matrix) |
911 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
912 | |
913 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
914 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
915 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
916 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
917 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 918 |
919 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
920 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
921 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
922 } | |
923 | |
924 | |
925 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
926 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
927 | |
928 static void | |
929 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
930 struct window *w; | |
931 int desired_p; | |
932 { | |
933 while (w) | |
314 | 934 { |
25012 | 935 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
936 { | |
937 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
938 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
939 } | |
940 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 941 { |
25012 | 942 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
943 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
944 } | |
945 else | |
946 { | |
947 if (desired_p) | |
948 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
949 else | |
314 | 950 { |
25012 | 951 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
952 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 953 } |
25012 | 954 } |
955 | |
956 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
957 } | |
958 } | |
959 | |
960 | |
961 | |
962 /*********************************************************************** | |
963 Glyph Rows | |
964 | |
965 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
966 ***********************************************************************/ | |
967 | |
968 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
969 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
970 structure members. */ | |
971 | |
972 void | |
973 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
974 struct glyph_row *row; | |
975 { | |
976 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
977 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
978 | |
979 /* Save pointers. */ | |
980 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
981 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
982 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
983 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
984 | |
985 /* Clear. */ | |
986 *row = null_row; | |
987 | |
988 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
989 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
990 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
991 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
992 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
993 } | |
994 | |
995 | |
996 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
997 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
998 | |
999 void | |
1000 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
1001 struct window *w; | |
1002 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1003 int y; | |
1004 { | |
1005 int min_y, max_y; | |
1006 | |
25546 | 1007 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1008 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1009 | |
1010 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1011 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1012 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1013 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1014 |
1015 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1016 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1017 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1018 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1019 else | |
1020 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1021 | |
1022 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1023 } | |
1024 | |
1025 | |
1026 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1027 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1028 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1029 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1030 ends. */ | |
1031 | |
1032 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1033 increment_row_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 1034 struct glyph_row *row; |
1035 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1036 { | |
1037 int area, i; | |
1038 | |
1039 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1040 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1041 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1042 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1043 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1044 | |
1045 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1046 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1047 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1048 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1049 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1050 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1051 | |
1052 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1053 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1054 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1055 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1056 } | |
1057 | |
1058 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1059 #if 0 |
25012 | 1060 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph |
1061 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1062 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1063 | |
1064 static void | |
1065 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1066 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1067 { | |
1068 int area; | |
1069 | |
1070 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1071 { | |
1072 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1073 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1074 | |
1075 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1076 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1077 | |
1078 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1079 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1080 | |
1081 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1082 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1083 | |
1084 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1085 { | |
1086 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1087 initialization. */ | |
1088 struct glyph temp; | |
1089 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1090 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1091 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1092 ++glyph_a; | |
1093 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1094 } |
1095 } | |
1096 } | |
25012 | 1097 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1098 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1099 |
1100 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1101 | |
1102 static INLINE void | |
1103 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1104 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1105 { | |
1106 int i; | |
1107 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1108 { | |
1109 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1110 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1111 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1112 } | |
1113 } | |
1114 | |
1115 | |
1116 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1117 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1118 | |
1119 INLINE void | |
1120 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1121 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1122 { | |
1123 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1124 | |
1125 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1126 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1127 | |
1128 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1129 *to = *from; | |
1130 | |
1131 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1132 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1133 } | |
1134 | |
1135 | |
1136 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1137 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1138 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1139 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1140 | |
1141 void | |
1142 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1143 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1144 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1145 { | |
1146 int area; | |
1147 | |
1148 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1149 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1150 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1151 | |
1152 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1153 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1154 if (from->used[area]) | |
1155 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1156 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1157 | |
1158 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1159 increment_row_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 1160 } |
1161 | |
1162 | |
1163 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1164 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1165 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1166 a memory leak. */ | |
1167 | |
1168 static INLINE void | |
1169 assign_row (to, from) | |
1170 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1171 { | |
1172 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1173 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1174 } | |
1175 | |
1176 | |
1177 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1178 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1179 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1180 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1181 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1182 | |
1183 static int | |
1184 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1185 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1186 { | |
1187 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1188 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1189 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1190 | |
1191 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1192 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1193 } | |
1194 | |
1195 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1196 #if 0 |
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1197 |
25012 | 1198 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice |
1199 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1200 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1201 | |
1202 static struct glyph_row * | |
1203 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1204 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1205 int row; | |
1206 { | |
1207 int i; | |
1208 | |
1209 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1210 | |
1211 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1212 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1213 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1214 break; | |
1215 | |
1216 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1217 } | |
1218 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1219 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1220 |
1221 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1222 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1223 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1224 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1225 | |
1226 void | |
1227 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1228 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1229 { | |
1230 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1231 { | |
1232 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1233 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1234 } | |
1235 } | |
1236 | |
1237 | |
1238 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1239 | |
1240 int | |
1241 line_hash_code (row) | |
1242 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1243 { | |
1244 int hash = 0; | |
1245 | |
1246 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1247 { | |
1248 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1249 { | |
1250 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1251 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1252 hash = -1; | |
1253 } | |
1254 else | |
1255 { | |
1256 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1257 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1258 | |
1259 while (glyph < end) | |
1260 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1261 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1262 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1263 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1264 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1265 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1266 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1267 ++glyph; |
1268 } | |
1269 | |
1270 if (hash == 0) | |
1271 hash = 1; | |
1272 } | |
1273 } | |
1274 | |
1275 return hash; | |
1276 } | |
1277 | |
1278 | |
1279 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1280 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1281 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1282 | |
1283 static unsigned int | |
1284 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1285 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1286 int vpos; | |
1287 { | |
1288 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1289 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1290 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1291 int len; | |
1292 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1293 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1294 | |
1295 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1296 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1297 { | |
1298 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1299 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1300 --end; | |
1301 | |
1302 /* All blank line. */ | |
1303 if (end == beg) | |
1304 return 0; | |
1305 | |
1306 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1307 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1308 ++beg; | |
1309 } | |
1310 | |
1311 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1312 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1313 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1314 len = end - beg; | |
1315 else | |
1316 { | |
1317 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1318 in LEN. */ | |
1319 len = 0; | |
1320 while (beg < end) | |
1321 { | |
1322 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1323 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1324 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1325 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1326 len += 1; |
1327 else | |
1328 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1329 | |
1330 ++beg; | |
1331 } | |
1332 } | |
1333 | |
1334 return len; | |
1335 } | |
1336 | |
1337 | |
1338 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1339 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1340 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
1341 visibility. */ | |
1342 | |
1343 static INLINE int | |
1344 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
1345 struct window *w; | |
1346 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1347 { | |
1348 if (a == b) | |
1349 return 1; | |
1350 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1351 return 0; | |
1352 else | |
1353 { | |
1354 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1355 int area; | |
1356 | |
1357 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
1358 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1359 { | |
1360 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1361 return 0; | |
1362 | |
1363 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1364 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1365 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1366 | |
1367 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1368 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1369 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1370 | |
1371 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1372 return 0; | |
1373 } | |
1374 | |
1375 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1376 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1377 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1378 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1379 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1380 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1381 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1382 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1383 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1384 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1385 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1386 || a->x != b->x | |
1387 /* Different height. */ | |
1388 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1389 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1390 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1391 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1392 return 0; | |
1393 } | |
1394 | |
1395 return 1; | |
1396 } | |
1397 | |
1398 | |
314 | 1399 |
25012 | 1400 /*********************************************************************** |
1401 Glyph Pool | |
1402 | |
1403 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1404 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1405 | |
1406 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1407 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1408 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1409 | |
1410 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1411 new_glyph_pool () | |
1412 { | |
1413 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1414 | |
1415 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1416 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1417 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1418 | |
1419 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1420 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1421 | |
1422 return result; | |
1423 } | |
1424 | |
1425 | |
1426 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1427 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1428 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1429 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1430 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1431 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1432 | |
1433 static void | |
1434 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1435 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1436 { | |
1437 if (pool) | |
1438 { | |
1439 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1440 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1441 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1442 | |
1443 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1444 xfree (pool); | |
1445 } | |
1446 } | |
1447 | |
1448 | |
1449 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1450 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1451 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1452 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1453 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1454 | |
1455 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1456 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1457 | |
1458 static int | |
1459 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1460 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1461 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1462 { | |
1463 int needed; | |
1464 int changed_p; | |
1465 | |
1466 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1467 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1468 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1469 | |
1470 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1471 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1472 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1473 { | |
1474 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1475 | |
1476 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1477 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1478 else | |
1479 { | |
1480 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1481 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1482 } | |
1483 | |
1484 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1485 } | |
1486 | |
1487 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1488 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1489 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1490 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1491 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1492 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1493 | |
1494 return changed_p; | |
1495 } | |
1496 | |
1497 | |
1498 | |
1499 /*********************************************************************** | |
1500 Debug Code | |
1501 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1502 | |
1503 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1504 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1505 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1506 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1507 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1508 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1509 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1510 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1511 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1512 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1513 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1514 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1515 |
25012 | 1516 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1517 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1518 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1519 MATRIX. */ | |
1520 | |
1521 void | |
1522 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1523 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1524 { | |
1525 int i, j; | |
1526 | |
1527 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1528 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1529 xassert (i == j | |
1530 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1531 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1532 } | |
1533 | |
1534 | |
1535 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1536 | |
1537 struct glyph_row * | |
1538 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1539 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1540 int row; | |
1541 { | |
1542 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1543 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1544 | |
1545 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1546 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1547 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1548 #if 0 |
25012 | 1549 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1550 #endif | |
1551 | |
1552 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1553 } | |
1554 | |
1555 | |
1556 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1557 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1558 nevertheless. */ | |
1559 | |
1560 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1561 window W. */ | |
1562 | |
1563 static void | |
1564 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1565 struct window *w; |
1566 { | |
25012 | 1567 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1568 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1569 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1570 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1571 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1572 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1573 int c; | |
1574 | |
1575 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1576 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1577 return; | |
1578 | |
1579 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1580 | |
1581 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1582 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1583 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1584 { | |
1585 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1586 | |
1587 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1588 last_text_row = row; | |
1589 | |
1590 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1591 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1592 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1593 | |
1594 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1595 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1596 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1597 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1598 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1599 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1600 | |
1601 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1602 of next row. */ | |
1603 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1604 { | |
1605 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1606 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1607 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1608 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1609 } | |
1610 row = next; | |
1611 } | |
1612 | |
1613 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1614 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1615 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1616 } | |
1617 | |
1618 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1619 | |
1620 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1621 | |
1622 | |
1623 | |
1624 /********************************************************************** | |
1625 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1626 **********************************************************************/ | |
1627 | |
1628 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1629 redisplay | |
1630 | |
1631 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1632 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1633 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1634 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1635 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1636 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1637 performed. | |
1638 | |
1639 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1640 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1641 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1642 | |
1643 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1644 | |
1645 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1646 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1647 | |
1648 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1649 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1650 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1651 | |
1652 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1653 function. | |
1654 | |
1655 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1656 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1657 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1658 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1659 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1660 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1661 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1662 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1663 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1664 | |
1665 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1666 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1667 necessary. | |
1668 | |
1669 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1670 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1671 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1672 windows in the sequence. | |
1673 | |
1674 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1675 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1676 | | | | | | |
1677 | | | | | |
1678 +---------+ | | result height | |
1679 | +---------+ | |
1680 | | | | |
1681 +----------+ --- | |
1682 | |
1683 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1684 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1685 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1686 | |
1687 |<---- result width -->| | |
1688 +---------+ --- | |
1689 | | | | |
1690 | | | | |
1691 +---------+--+ | | |
1692 | | | | |
1693 | | result height | |
1694 | | | |
1695 +------------+---------+ | | |
1696 | | | | |
1697 | | | | |
1698 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1699 | |
1700 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1701 allocated. */ | |
1702 | |
1703 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1704 | |
1705 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1706 size. */ | |
1707 | |
1708 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1709 | |
1710 static struct dim | |
1711 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1712 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1713 Lisp_Object window; | |
1714 int x, y; | |
1715 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1716 int dim_only_p; | |
1717 int *window_change_flags; | |
1718 { | |
1719 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1720 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1721 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1722 struct dim total; | |
1723 struct dim dim; | |
1724 struct window *w; | |
1725 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1726 | |
1727 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1728 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1729 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1730 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1731 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1732 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1733 in_horz_combination_p | |
1734 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1735 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1736 | |
1737 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1738 do | |
1739 { | |
1740 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1741 | |
1742 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1743 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1744 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1745 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1746 dim_only_p, | |
1747 window_change_flags); | |
1748 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1749 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1750 dim_only_p, | |
1751 window_change_flags); | |
1752 else | |
1753 { | |
1754 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1755 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1756 { | |
1757 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1758 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1759 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1760 } | |
1761 | |
1762 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1763 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1764 dim.width = XINT (w->width); |
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1765 dim.height = XINT (w->height); |
25012 | 1766 |
1767 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1768 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1769 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1770 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1771 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1772 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1773 w->right_margin_width) | |
1774 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1775 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1776 w->left_margin_width) | |
1777 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1778 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1779 | |
1780 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1781 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1782 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1783 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1784 necessary. */ | |
1785 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1786 { | |
1787 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1788 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1789 } | |
1790 } | |
1791 | |
1792 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1793 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1794 below W. */ | |
1795 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1796 x += dim.width; | |
1797 else | |
1798 y += dim.height; | |
1799 | |
1800 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1801 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1802 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1803 | |
1804 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1805 window = w->next; | |
1806 } | |
1807 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1808 | |
1809 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1810 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1811 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1812 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1813 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1814 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1815 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1816 { | |
1817 total.width = x - x0; | |
1818 total.height = hmax; | |
1819 } | |
1820 else | |
1821 { | |
1822 total.width = wmax; | |
1823 total.height = y - y0; | |
1824 } | |
1825 | |
1826 return total; | |
1827 } | |
1828 | |
1829 | |
1830 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1831 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1832 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1833 | |
1834 static void | |
1835 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1836 struct window *w; | |
1837 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1838 { | |
1839 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1840 | |
1841 while (w) | |
314 | 1842 { |
25012 | 1843 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1844 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1845 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1846 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1847 else | |
314 | 1848 { |
25012 | 1849 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1850 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1851 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1852 struct dim dim; | |
1853 | |
1854 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1855 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1856 { |
25012 | 1857 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1858 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1859 } |
25012 | 1860 |
1861 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1862 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1863 / ch_dim.width) | |
1864 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1865 + 2 | |
1866 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1867 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1868 + 1 + 1); | |
1869 | |
1870 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1871 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1872 / ch_dim.height) | |
1873 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1874 bottom of the window. */ | |
1875 + 2 | |
1876 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1877 + 2); | |
1878 | |
1879 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1880 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1881 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1882 } | |
1883 | |
1884 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1885 } | |
1886 } | |
1887 | |
1888 | |
1889 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1890 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1891 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1892 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1893 | |
1894 void | |
1895 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1896 struct frame *f; | |
1897 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1898 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1899 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1900 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1901 |
25012 | 1902 if (f) |
1903 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1904 else | |
1905 { | |
1906 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1907 | |
1908 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1909 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1910 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1911 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1912 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1913 } |
1914 | |
1915 | |
1916 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1917 | |
1918 To be called from init_display. | |
1919 | |
1920 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1921 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1922 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1923 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1924 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1925 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1926 | |
1927 static void | |
1928 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1929 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1930 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1931 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1932 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1933 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1934 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1935 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1936 |
1937 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1938 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1939 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1940 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1941 |
1942 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1943 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1944 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1945 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1946 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1947 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1948 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1949 } | |
1950 | |
1951 | |
1952 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1953 | |
1954 static void | |
1955 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1956 struct frame *f; | |
1957 { | |
1958 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1959 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1960 else | |
1961 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1962 | |
1963 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1964 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1965 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1966 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1967 | |
1968 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1969 } | |
1970 | |
1971 | |
1972 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1973 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1974 | |
1975 static void | |
1976 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1977 struct frame *f; | |
1978 { | |
1979 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1980 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1981 int pool_changed_p; | |
1982 int window_change_flags; | |
1983 int top_window_y; | |
1984 | |
1985 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
1986 return; | |
1987 | |
1988 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
1989 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
1990 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
1991 | |
1992 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
1993 | |
1994 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
1995 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
1996 { | |
1997 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1998 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1999 } | |
2000 | |
2001 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
2002 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
2003 { | |
2004 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2005 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2006 } | |
2007 | |
2008 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2009 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2010 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2011 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2012 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2013 matrix. */ | |
2014 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2015 matrix_dim | |
2016 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2017 0, top_window_y, | |
2018 ch_dim, 1, | |
2019 &window_change_flags); | |
2020 | |
2021 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2022 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2023 | |
2024 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2025 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2026 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2027 | |
2028 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2029 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2030 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2031 { | |
2032 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2033 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2034 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2035 &window_change_flags); | |
2036 | |
2037 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2038 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2039 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2040 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2041 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2042 | |
2043 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2044 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2045 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2046 | |
2047 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2048 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2049 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2050 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2051 } | |
2052 } | |
2053 | |
2054 | |
2055 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2056 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2057 | |
2058 static void | |
2059 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2060 struct frame *f; | |
2061 { | |
2062 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2063 struct window *w; | |
2064 | |
2065 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2066 | |
2067 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2068 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2069 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2070 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2071 #else | |
2072 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2073 #endif | |
2074 | |
2075 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2076 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2077 ch_dim); | |
2078 | |
2079 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2080 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2081 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2082 { | |
2083 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2084 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2085 { | |
2086 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2087 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2088 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2089 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2090 } | |
2091 else | |
2092 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2093 | |
2094 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2095 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2096 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2097 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2098 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2099 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2100 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2101 } | |
2102 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2103 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2104 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2105 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2106 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2107 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2108 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2109 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2110 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2111 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2112 } | |
2113 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2114 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2115 |
2116 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2117 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2118 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2119 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2120 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2121 } | |
2122 | |
2123 | |
2124 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2125 | |
2126 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2127 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2128 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2129 | |
2130 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2131 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2132 | |
2133 static void | |
2134 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2135 struct frame *f; | |
2136 { | |
2137 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2138 | |
2139 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2140 { | |
2141 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2142 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2143 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2144 } | |
2145 else | |
2146 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2147 } | |
2148 | |
2149 | |
2150 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2151 | |
2152 static void | |
2153 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2154 struct frame *f; | |
2155 { | |
2156 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2157 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2158 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2159 } | |
2160 | |
2161 | |
2162 | |
2163 /********************************************************************** | |
2164 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2165 **********************************************************************/ | |
2166 | |
2167 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2168 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2169 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2170 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2171 | |
2172 void | |
2173 free_glyphs (f) | |
2174 struct frame *f; | |
2175 { | |
2176 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2177 { | |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2178 /* Block interrupt input so that we don't get surprised by an X |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2179 event while we're in an inconsistent state. */ |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2180 BLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 2181 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; |
2182 | |
2183 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2184 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2185 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2186 | |
2187 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2188 glyph matrices. */ | |
2189 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2190 { | |
2191 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2192 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2193 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2194 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2195 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2196 } | |
2197 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2198 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2199 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2200 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2201 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2202 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2203 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2204 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2205 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2206 } |
2207 | |
2208 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2209 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2210 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2211 { | |
2212 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2213 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2214 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2215 } | |
2216 | |
2217 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2218 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2219 { | |
2220 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2221 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2222 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2223 } |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2224 |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2225 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
314 | 2226 } |
2227 } | |
2228 | |
25012 | 2229 |
2230 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2231 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2232 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2233 | |
2234 void | |
2235 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2236 struct window *w; | |
2237 { | |
2238 while (w) | |
2239 { | |
2240 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2241 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2242 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2243 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2244 else | |
2245 { | |
2246 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2247 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2248 W. */ | |
2249 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2250 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2251 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2252 } | |
2253 | |
2254 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2255 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2256 } | |
2257 } | |
2258 | |
2259 | |
2260 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2261 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2262 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2263 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2264 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2265 void |
25012 | 2266 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2267 { |
25012 | 2268 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2269 | |
2270 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2271 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2272 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2273 | |
2274 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2275 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2276 abort (); | |
2277 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2278 abort (); | |
2279 } | |
2280 | |
2281 | |
2282 | |
2283 /********************************************************************** | |
2284 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2285 **********************************************************************/ | |
2286 | |
2287 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2288 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2289 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2290 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2291 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2292 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2293 window matrices in this section. | |
2294 | |
2295 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2296 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2297 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2298 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2299 | |
2300 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2301 | desired | desired | | |
2302 | | | | |
2303 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2304 | current | | |
2305 | | | |
2306 +----------------------------------+ | |
2307 | |
2308 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2309 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2310 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2311 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2312 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2313 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2314 | |
2315 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2316 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2317 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2318 enabled. | |
2319 | |
2320 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2321 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2322 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2323 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2324 | |
2325 This problem is solved like this: | |
2326 | |
2327 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2328 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2329 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2330 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2331 automatically. | |
2332 | |
2333 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2334 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2335 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2336 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2337 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2338 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2339 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2340 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2341 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2342 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2343 | |
2344 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2345 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2346 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2347 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2348 | |
2349 static void | |
2350 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2351 struct frame *f; | |
2352 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2353 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2354 |
25012 | 2355 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2356 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2357 | |
2358 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2359 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2360 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2361 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2362 | |
2363 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2364 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2365 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2366 } | |
2367 | |
2368 | |
2369 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2370 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2371 | |
2372 static void | |
2373 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2374 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2375 struct window *w; | |
2376 { | |
2377 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2378 { |
25012 | 2379 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2380 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2381 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2382 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2383 else | |
2384 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2385 | |
2386 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2387 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2388 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2389 |
25012 | 2390 |
2391 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2392 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2393 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2394 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2395 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2396 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2397 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2398 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2399 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2400 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2401 | |
2402 static void | |
2403 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2404 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2405 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2406 { |
25012 | 2407 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2408 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2409 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2410 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2411 | |
2412 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2413 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2414 { | |
2415 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2416 | |
2417 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2418 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2419 { | |
2420 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2421 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2422 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2423 : '|'); | |
2424 } | |
2425 } | |
2426 else | |
2427 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2428 | |
2429 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2430 frame matrix. */ | |
2431 window_y = 0; | |
2432 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2433 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2434 { |
25012 | 2435 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2436 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2437 | |
2438 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2439 window row. */ | |
2440 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2441 | |
2442 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2443 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2444 | |
2445 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2446 { |
25012 | 2447 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2448 row to frame row. */ | |
2449 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2450 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2451 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2452 } | |
2453 else | |
2454 { | |
2455 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2456 | |
2457 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2458 windows. */ | |
2459 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2460 { | |
2461 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2462 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2463 } | |
2464 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2465 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2466 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2467 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2468 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2469 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2470 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2471 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2472 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2473 { |
25012 | 2474 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2475 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2476 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2477 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2478 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2479 | |
2480 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2481 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2482 | |
2483 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2484 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2485 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2486 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2487 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2488 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2489 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2490 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2491 |
25012 | 2492 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2493 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2494 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2495 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2496 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2497 #endif |
25012 | 2498 } |
2499 | |
2500 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2501 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2502 can be done simply. */ | |
2503 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2504 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2505 | |
2506 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2507 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2508 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2509 | |
2510 /* Next row. */ | |
2511 ++window_y; | |
2512 ++frame_y; | |
2513 } | |
2514 } | |
2515 | |
2516 | |
2517 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2518 | |
2519 Each row has the form: | |
2520 | |
2521 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2522 | left | text | right | | |
2523 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2524 | |
2525 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2526 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2527 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2528 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2529 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2530 | |
2531 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2532 | |
2533 static void | |
2534 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2535 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2536 { | |
2537 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2538 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2539 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2540 } | |
2541 | |
2542 | |
2543 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2544 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2545 | |
2546 static void | |
2547 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2548 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2549 int area; | |
2550 { | |
2551 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2552 { | |
2553 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2554 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2555 | |
2556 while (text < end) | |
2557 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2558 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2559 } | |
2560 } | |
2561 | |
2562 | |
2563 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2564 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2565 | |
2566 static void | |
2567 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2568 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2569 int upto; | |
2570 { | |
2571 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2572 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2573 | |
2574 while (i < upto) | |
2575 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2576 | |
2577 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2578 } | |
2579 | |
2580 | |
2581 | |
2582 /********************************************************************** | |
2583 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2584 **********************************************************************/ | |
2585 | |
2586 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2587 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2588 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2589 | |
2590 static INLINE void | |
2591 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2592 struct frame *f; | |
2593 { | |
2594 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2595 } | |
2596 | |
2597 | |
2598 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2599 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2600 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2601 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2602 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2603 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2604 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2605 | |
2606 static INLINE void | |
2607 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2608 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2609 int row; | |
2610 { | |
2611 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2612 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2613 | |
2614 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2615 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2616 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2617 | |
2618 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2619 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2620 | |
2621 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2622 for window matrices. */ | |
2623 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2624 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2625 } | |
2626 | |
2627 | |
2628 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2629 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2630 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2631 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2632 | |
2633 static void | |
2634 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2635 struct window *w; | |
2636 int frame_row; | |
2637 { | |
2638 while (w) | |
2639 { | |
2640 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2641 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2642 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2643 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2644 else | |
2645 { | |
2646 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2647 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2648 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2649 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2650 | |
2651 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2652 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2653 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2654 { |
25012 | 2655 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2656 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2657 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2658 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2659 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2660 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2661 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2662 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2663 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2664 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2665 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2666 } |
25012 | 2667 |
2668 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2669 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2670 } |
25012 | 2671 |
2672 | |
2673 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2674 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2675 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2676 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2677 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2678 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2679 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2680 | |
2681 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2682 | |
2683 void | |
2684 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2685 retained_p) | |
2686 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2687 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2688 int *copy_from; | |
2689 char *retained_p; | |
2690 { | |
2691 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2692 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2693 | |
2694 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2695 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2696 | |
2697 int i; | |
2698 | |
2699 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2700 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2701 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2702 | |
2703 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2704 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2705 { | |
2706 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2707 | |
2708 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2709 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2710 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2711 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2712 | |
2713 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2714 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2715 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2716 } | |
2717 | |
2718 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2719 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2720 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2721 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2722 } | |
2723 | |
2724 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2725 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2726 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2727 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2728 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2729 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2730 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2731 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2732 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2733 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2734 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2735 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2736 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2737 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2738 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2739 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2740 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2741 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2742 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2743 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2744 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2745 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2746 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2747 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2748 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2749 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2750 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2751 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2752 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2753 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2754 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2755 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2756 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2757 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2758 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2759 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2760 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2761 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2762 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2763 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2764 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2765 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2766 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2767 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2768 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2769 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2770 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2771 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2777 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2778 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2779 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2780 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2781 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2782 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2783 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2784 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2785 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2786 |
25012 | 2787 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2788 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2789 | |
2790 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2791 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2792 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2793 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2794 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2795 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2796 which is empty. */ | |
2797 | |
2798 static void | |
2799 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2800 struct window *w; | |
2801 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2802 int *copy_from; | |
2803 char *retained_p; | |
2804 { | |
2805 while (w) | |
2806 { | |
2807 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2808 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2809 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2810 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2811 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2812 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2813 else | |
2814 { | |
2815 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2816 matrix m. */ | |
2817 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2818 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2819 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2820 | |
2821 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2822 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2823 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2824 | |
2825 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2826 { | |
2827 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2828 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2829 | |
2830 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2831 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2832 | |
2833 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2834 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2835 | |
2836 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2837 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2838 | |
2839 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2840 int from_inside_window_p | |
2841 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2842 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2843 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2844 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2845 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2846 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2847 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2848 { |
2849 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2850 int enabled_before_p; | |
2851 | |
2852 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2853 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2854 that. */ | |
2855 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2856 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2857 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2858 | |
2859 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2860 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2861 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2862 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2863 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2864 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2865 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2866 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2867 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2868 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2869 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2870 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2871 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2872 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2873 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2874 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2875 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2876 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2877 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2878 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2879 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2880 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2881 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2882 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2883 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2884 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2885 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2886 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2887 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2888 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2889 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2890 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2891 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2892 |
2893 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2894 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2895 } | |
2896 | |
2897 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2898 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2899 } | |
2900 } | |
2901 | |
2902 | |
2903 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2904 | |
2905 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2906 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2907 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2908 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2909 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2910 |
21514 | 2911 void |
25012 | 2912 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2913 struct window *w; |
2914 { | |
25012 | 2915 while (w) |
2916 { | |
2917 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2918 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2919 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2920 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2921 else | |
2922 { | |
2923 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2924 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2925 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2926 } | |
2927 | |
2928 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2929 } | |
2930 } | |
2931 | |
2932 | |
2933 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2934 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2935 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2936 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2937 | |
2938 static void | |
2939 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2940 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2941 { | |
2942 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2943 int i = 0; | |
2944 | |
2945 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2946 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2947 | |
2948 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2949 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2950 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2951 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2952 { | |
2953 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2954 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2955 abort (); | |
2956 ++i, ++j; | |
2957 } | |
2958 } | |
2959 | |
2960 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2961 | |
2962 | |
2963 | |
2964 /********************************************************************** | |
2965 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2966 **********************************************************************/ | |
2967 | |
2968 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2969 | |
2970 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2971 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2972 | |
2973 static int | |
2974 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2975 struct window *w; | |
2976 int vpos; | |
2977 { | |
2978 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2979 | |
2980 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2981 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2982 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2983 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2984 return vpos; | |
2985 } | |
2986 | |
2987 | |
2988 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
2989 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2990 | |
2991 static int | |
2992 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
2993 struct window *w; | |
2994 int hpos; | |
2995 { | |
2996 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2997 | |
2998 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2999 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
3000 return hpos; | |
314 | 3001 } |
25012 | 3002 |
3003 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
3004 | |
3005 | |
314 | 3006 |
25012 | 3007 /********************************************************************** |
3008 Redrawing Frames | |
3009 **********************************************************************/ | |
3010 | |
3011 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3012 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3013 (frame) | |
3014 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3015 { | |
3016 struct frame *f; | |
3017 | |
3018 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3019 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3020 | |
3021 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3022 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3023 called so early here). */ | |
3024 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3025 return Qnil; | |
3026 | |
3027 update_begin (f); | |
3028 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3029 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3030 clear_frame (); | |
3031 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3032 update_end (f); | |
3033 fflush (stdout); | |
3034 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3035 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3036 its redisplay done. */ | |
3037 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3038 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3039 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3040 return Qnil; | |
3041 } | |
3042 | |
3043 | |
3044 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3045 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3046 | |
3047 void | |
3048 redraw_frame (f) | |
3049 struct frame *f; | |
3050 { | |
3051 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3052 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3053 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3054 } | |
3055 | |
3056 | |
3057 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3058 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3059 () | |
3060 { | |
3061 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3062 | |
3063 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3064 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3065 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3066 | |
3067 return Qnil; | |
3068 } | |
3069 | |
3070 | |
3071 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3072 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3073 | |
3074 void | |
3075 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3076 { | |
3077 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3078 | |
3079 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3080 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3081 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3082 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3083 } | |
3084 | |
3085 | |
3086 | |
3087 /*********************************************************************** | |
3088 Direct Operations | |
3089 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3090 | |
3091 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3092 | |
3093 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3094 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3095 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3096 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3097 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3098 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3099 | |
3100 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3101 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3102 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3103 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3104 |
3105 int | |
3106 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3107 int g; | |
3108 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3109 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3110 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3111 struct it it, it2; | |
3112 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3113 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3114 int n; | |
3115 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3116 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3117 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3118 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3119 int added_width; | |
3120 struct text_pos pos; | |
3121 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3122 | |
3123 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3124 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3125 | |
3126 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3127 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3128 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3129 || fonts_changed_p | |
3130 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3131 || face_change_count | |
3132 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3133 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3134 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3135 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3136 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3137 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3138 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3139 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3140 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3141 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3142 || (overwrite_p | |
3143 && PT != ZV | |
3144 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3145 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3146 || g == '\t' | |
3147 || g == '\n' | |
3148 || g == '\r' | |
3149 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3150 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3151 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3152 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3153 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3154 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3155 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3156 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3157 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3158 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3159 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3160 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3161 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3162 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3163 return 0; | |
3164 | |
3165 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3166 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3167 position. */ | |
3168 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3169 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
28361
eccb57c44da5
(direct_output_for_insert): Use DEC_TEXT_POS
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27968
diff
changeset
|
3170 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos, !NILP (current_buffer->enable_multibyte_characters)); |
25012 | 3171 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, |
3172 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3173 | |
3174 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3175 | |
3176 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3177 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3178 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3179 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3180 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3181 { | |
3182 struct glyph *last; | |
3183 | |
3184 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3185 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3186 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3187 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3188 return 0; |
3189 } | |
3190 | |
3191 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3192 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3193 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3194 return 0; | |
3195 | |
3196 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3197 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3198 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3199 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3200 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3201 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3202 | |
3203 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3204 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3205 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3206 combination of both. */ | |
3207 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3208 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3209 { | |
3210 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3211 | |
3212 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3213 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3214 return 0; | |
3215 | |
3216 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3217 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3218 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3219 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3220 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3221 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3222 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3223 return 0; | |
3224 | |
3225 delta += 1; | |
3226 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3227 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3228 } | |
3229 | |
3230 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3231 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3232 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3233 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3234 return 0; |
3235 | |
25012 | 3236 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3237 it2 = it; | |
3238 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3239 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3240 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3241 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3242 { | |
3243 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3244 return 0; | |
3245 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3246 } | |
3247 | |
3248 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3249 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3250 | |
3251 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3252 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3253 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3254 | |
3255 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3256 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3257 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3258 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3259 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3260 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3261 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3262 | |
3263 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3264 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3265 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3266 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3267 while (glyph < end) | |
3268 { | |
3269 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3270 ++glyph; | |
3271 } | |
3272 | |
3273 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3274 inserted ones. */ | |
3275 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3276 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3277 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3278 | |
3279 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3280 { | |
3281 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3282 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3283 } | |
3284 | |
3285 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3286 increment_matrix_positions (w->current_matrix, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3287 w->cursor.vpos + 1, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3288 w->current_matrix->nrows, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3289 delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 3290 |
3291 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3292 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3293 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3294 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3295 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3296 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3297 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3298 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3299 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3300 | |
3301 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3302 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3303 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3304 and updated_row. */ | |
3305 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3306 update_begin (f); | |
3307 if (rif) | |
3308 { | |
3309 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3310 | |
3311 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3312 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3313 else | |
3314 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3315 } | |
3316 else | |
3317 { | |
3318 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3319 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3320 else | |
3321 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3322 } | |
3323 | |
3324 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3325 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3326 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3327 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3328 | |
3329 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3330 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3331 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3332 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3333 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3334 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3335 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3336 else | |
3337 { | |
3338 int x, y; | |
3339 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3340 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3341 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3342 : 0)); | |
3343 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3344 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3345 } | |
3346 | |
3347 if (rif) | |
3348 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3349 update_end (f); | |
3350 updated_row = NULL; | |
3351 fflush (stdout); | |
3352 | |
3353 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3354 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3355 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3356 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3357 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3358 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3359 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3360 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3361 |
25012 | 3362 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3363 return 1; |
3364 } | |
3365 | |
25012 | 3366 |
3367 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3368 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3369 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3370 | |
314 | 3371 int |
3372 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3373 int n; | |
3374 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3375 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3376 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3377 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3378 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3379 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
3380 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, XINT (w->last_point), |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3381 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3382 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3383 |
25012 | 3384 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3385 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3386 return 0; |
25012 | 3387 |
3388 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3389 displaying a message. */ | |
3390 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3391 return 0; | |
3392 | |
3393 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3394 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3395 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3396 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3397 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3398 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3399 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3400 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3401 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3402 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3403 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3404 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3405 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3406 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3407 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3408 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3409 |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3410 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3411 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3412 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3413 |
25012 | 3414 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3415 | |
3416 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3417 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3418 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3419 |
25012 | 3420 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3421 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3422 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3423 |
3424 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3425 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3426 | |
3427 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3428 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3429 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3430 else | |
3431 { | |
3432 int x, y; | |
3433 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3434 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3435 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3436 : 0)); | |
3437 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3438 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3439 } | |
3440 | |
314 | 3441 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3442 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3443 return 1; |
3444 } | |
25012 | 3445 |
3446 | |
314 | 3447 |
25012 | 3448 /*********************************************************************** |
3449 Frame Update | |
3450 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3451 | |
3452 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3453 | |
3454 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3455 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3456 scrolling. | |
3457 | |
3458 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3459 |
3460 int | |
25012 | 3461 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3462 struct frame *f; | |
3463 int force_p; | |
3464 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3465 { | |
3466 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3467 int paused_p; | |
3468 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3469 | |
3470 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3471 { | |
3472 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3473 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3474 | |
3475 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3476 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3477 | |
3478 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3479 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3480 update_begin (f); | |
3481 | |
3482 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3483 support. */ | |
3484 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3485 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3486 | |
3487 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3488 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3489 { |
3490 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3491 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3492 |
3493 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3494 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3495 { | |
3496 update_window (w, 1); | |
3497 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3498 | |
3499 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3500 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3501 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3502 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3503 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3504 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3505 |
3506 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3507 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3508 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3509 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3510 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3511 } |
3512 } | |
3513 | |
3514 | |
3515 /* Update windows. */ | |
3516 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3517 update_end (f); | |
3518 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3519 | |
3520 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3521 #if 0 | |
3522 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3523 #endif | |
3524 } | |
3525 else | |
3526 { | |
3527 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3528 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3529 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3530 | |
3531 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3532 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3533 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3534 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3535 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3536 | |
3537 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3538 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3539 | |
3540 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3541 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3542 } | |
3543 | |
3544 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3545 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3546 return paused_p; | |
3547 } | |
3548 | |
3549 | |
3550 | |
3551 /************************************************************************ | |
3552 Window-based updates | |
3553 ************************************************************************/ | |
3554 | |
3555 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3556 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3557 | |
3558 static int | |
3559 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3560 struct window *w; | |
3561 int force_p; | |
3562 { | |
3563 int paused_p = 0; | |
3564 | |
3565 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3566 { | |
3567 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3568 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3569 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3570 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3571 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3572 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3573 | |
3574 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3575 } | |
3576 | |
3577 return paused_p; | |
3578 } | |
3579 | |
3580 | |
3581 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3582 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3583 | |
3584 void | |
3585 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3586 struct window *w; | |
3587 int force_p; | |
3588 { | |
3589 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3590 { | |
3591 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3592 | |
3593 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3594 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3595 | |
3596 /* Update W. */ | |
3597 update_begin (f); | |
3598 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3599 update_end (f); | |
3600 | |
3601 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3602 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3603 } | |
3604 } | |
3605 | |
3606 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3607 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3608 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3609 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3610 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3611 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3612 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3613 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3614 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3615 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3616 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3617 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3618 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3619 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3620 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3621 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3622 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3623 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3624 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3625 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3626 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3627 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3628 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3629 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3630 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3631 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3632 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3633 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3634 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3635 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3636 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3637 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3638 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3639 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3640 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3641 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3642 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3643 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3644 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3645 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3646 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3647 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3648 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3649 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3650 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3651 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3652 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3653 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3654 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3655 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3656 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3657 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3658 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3664 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3665 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3666 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3669 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3673 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3674 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3678 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3695 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3696 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3697 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3698 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3702 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 |
25012 | 3705 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3706 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3707 | |
3708 static int | |
3709 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3710 struct window *w; | |
3711 int force_p; | |
3712 { | |
3713 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3714 int paused_p; | |
3715 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3716 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3717 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3718 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3719 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3720 #endif |
25012 | 3721 |
3722 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3723 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3724 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3725 | |
3726 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3727 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3728 force_p = 1; | |
3729 else | |
3730 detect_input_pending (); | |
3731 | |
3732 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3733 the update. */ | |
3734 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3735 { | |
3736 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3737 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3738 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3739 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3740 |
3741 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3742 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3743 | |
3744 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3745 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3746 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3747 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3748 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3749 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3750 |
3751 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3752 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3753 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3754 { | |
3755 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3756 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3757 desired_matrix)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3758 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3759 } |
3760 | |
3761 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3762 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3763 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3764 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3765 ++row; | |
3766 | |
3767 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3768 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3769 { | |
25546 | 3770 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3771 if (rc < 0) |
3772 { | |
3773 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3774 paused_p = 0; | |
3775 goto set_cursor; | |
3776 } | |
3777 else if (rc > 0) | |
3778 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3779 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3780 } |
3781 | |
3782 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3783 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3784 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3785 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3786 { |
25546 | 3787 header_line_row->y = 0; |
25012 | 3788 update_window_line (w, 0); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3789 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3790 } |
3791 | |
3792 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3793 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3794 if (row->enabled_p | |
3795 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3796 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3797 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3798 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3799 { | |
3800 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3801 int i; | |
3802 | |
3803 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3804 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3805 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3806 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3807 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3808 detect_input_pending (); | |
3809 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3810 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3811 |
3812 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3813 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3814 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3815 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3816 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3817 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3818 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3819 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3820 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3821 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3822 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3823 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3824 } | |
3825 | |
3826 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3827 paused_p = row < end; | |
3828 | |
3829 set_cursor: | |
3830 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3831 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3832 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3833 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3834 && changed_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3835 && !paused_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3836 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3837 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3838 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3839 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3840 |
25012 | 3841 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3842 { | |
3843 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3844 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3845 | |
3846 #if 0 | |
3847 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3848 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3849 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3850 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3851 #endif | |
3852 } | |
3853 | |
3854 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3855 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3856 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3857 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3858 |
25012 | 3859 /* End of update of window W. */ |
3860 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3861 |
25012 | 3862 } |
3863 else | |
3864 paused_p = 1; | |
3865 | |
3866 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3867 |
25012 | 3868 return paused_p; |
3869 } | |
3870 | |
3871 | |
3872 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3873 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3874 | |
3875 static void | |
3876 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3877 struct window *w; | |
3878 int area, vpos; | |
3879 { | |
3880 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3881 | |
3882 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3883 will be relative to. */ | |
3884 updated_area = area; | |
3885 | |
3886 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3887 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3888 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3889 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3890 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3891 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3892 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3893 } | |
3894 | |
3895 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3896 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3897 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3898 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3899 static int |
25012 | 3900 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3901 struct window *w; | |
3902 int vpos; | |
314 | 3903 { |
25012 | 3904 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3905 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3906 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3907 |
3908 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3909 will be relative to. */ | |
3910 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3911 | |
3912 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3913 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3914 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3915 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3916 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3917 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3918 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3919 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3920 || current_row->overlapped_p |
25012 | 3921 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3922 { | |
3923 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3924 | |
3925 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3926 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3927 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3928 | |
3929 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3930 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3931 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3932 } |
3933 else | |
3934 { | |
3935 int stop, i, x; | |
3936 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3937 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3938 | |
3939 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3940 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3941 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3942 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3943 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3944 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3945 | |
3946 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3947 i = 0; | |
3948 x = desired_row->x; | |
3949 | |
3950 while (i < stop) | |
3951 { | |
3952 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3953 don't have to be written. */ | |
3954 while (i < stop | |
3955 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3956 { | |
3957 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3958 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3959 } | |
3960 | |
3961 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3962 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3963 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3964 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3965 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3966 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3967 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3968 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3969 && i > 0 | |
3970 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3971 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3972 { | |
3973 int left, right; | |
3974 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3975 &left, &right); | |
3976 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3977 { | |
3978 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
3979 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3980 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3981 } | |
3982 } | |
3983 | |
3984 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
3985 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
3986 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
3987 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
3988 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3989 { | |
3990 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
3991 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
3992 int current_x = x; | |
3993 | |
3994 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
3995 while (i < stop | |
3996 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
3997 && x == current_x) | |
3998 { | |
3999 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4000 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4001 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
4002 } | |
4003 | |
4004 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
4005 { | |
4006 i = start_hpos; | |
4007 x = start_x; | |
4008 desired_glyph = start; | |
4009 break; | |
4010 } | |
4011 | |
4012 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
4013 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4014 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4015 } |
4016 } | |
4017 | |
4018 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4019 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4020 { | |
4021 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4022 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4023 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4024 } |
4025 | |
4026 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4027 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4028 { | |
4029 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4030 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4031 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4032 appropriately above. */ | |
4033 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4034 } | |
4035 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4036 { | |
4037 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4038 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4039 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4040 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4041 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4042 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4043 } |
4044 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4045 { | |
4046 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4047 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4048 int x; | |
4049 | |
4050 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4051 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4052 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4053 | |
4054 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4055 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4056 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4057 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4058 this way. */ | |
4059 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4060 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4061 { | |
4062 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4063 x = -1; | |
4064 } | |
4065 else | |
4066 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4067 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4068 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4069 } |
4070 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4071 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4072 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4073 } |
4074 | |
4075 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4076 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4077 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4078 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4079 static int |
25012 | 4080 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
4081 struct window *w; | |
4082 int vpos; | |
4083 { | |
4084 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4085 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4086 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4087 |
4088 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
4089 | |
4090 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4091 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4092 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4093 | |
4094 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4095 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4096 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4097 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4098 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4099 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4100 } |
25012 | 4101 |
4102 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4103 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
25012 | 4104 |
4105 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4106 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4107 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4108 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4109 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4110 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4111 } |
25012 | 4112 |
4113 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
4114 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
4115 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
4116 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
4117 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
4118 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
4119 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
4120 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
4121 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
4122 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
4123 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
4124 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
4125 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
4126 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
4127 | |
4128 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4129 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4130 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4131 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4132 } |
4133 | |
4134 | |
4135 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4136 be called from update_window. */ | |
4137 | |
4138 static void | |
4139 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4140 struct window *w; | |
4141 { | |
4142 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4143 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4144 | |
4145 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4146 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4147 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4148 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4149 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4150 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4151 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4152 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4153 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4154 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4155 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4156 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4157 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4158 { | |
4159 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4160 | |
4161 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4162 { | |
4163 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4164 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4165 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4166 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4167 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4168 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4169 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4170 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4171 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4172 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4173 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4174 ++row) |
25012 | 4175 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4176 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4177 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4178 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4179 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4180 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4181 break; |
25012 | 4182 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4183 |
25012 | 4184 if (last_row) |
4185 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4186 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4187 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4188 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4189 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4190 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4191 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4192 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4193 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4194 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4195 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4196 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4197 |
25012 | 4198 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4199 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4200 } |
4201 } | |
4202 } | |
4203 else | |
4204 { | |
4205 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4206 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4207 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4208 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4209 } | |
4210 | |
4211 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4212 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4213 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4214 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4215 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4216 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4217 } | |
4218 | |
4219 | |
4220 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
25546 | 4221 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4222 |
4223 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4224 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4225 O(N) time. | |
4226 | |
4227 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4228 | |
4229 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4230 | |
4231 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4232 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4233 | |
4234 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4235 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4236 | |
4237 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4238 forward and backward. | |
4239 | |
4240 Value is | |
4241 | |
4242 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4243 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4244 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4245 | |
4246 static int | |
25546 | 4247 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4248 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4249 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4250 { |
4251 struct symbol | |
4252 { | |
4253 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
4254 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
4255 | |
4256 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
4257 short new_line_number; | |
4258 | |
4259 /* The line itself. */ | |
4260 struct glyph_row *row; | |
4261 | |
4262 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
4263 struct symbol *next; | |
4264 }; | |
4265 | |
4266 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
4267 struct symbol **table; | |
4268 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
4269 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
4270 struct symbol *sym; | |
4271 struct run **runs; | |
4272 int nruns; | |
4273 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4274 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4275 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
4276 | |
4277 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
25546 | 4278 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
25012 | 4279 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
4280 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4281 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
4282 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4283 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4284 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4285 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
4286 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
4287 { | |
4288 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4289 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4290 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4291 ++i; | |
4292 } | |
4293 | |
4294 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4295 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4296 return -1; | |
4297 | |
4298 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4299 | |
4300 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4301 desired matrix. */ | |
4302 i = first_new + 1; | |
4303 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4304 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
4305 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4306 ++i; | |
4307 | |
4308 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4309 return 0; | |
4310 | |
4311 last_new = i; | |
4312 | |
4313 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4314 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4315 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4316 disabled. */ | |
4317 i = first_old + 1; | |
4318 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4319 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4320 ++i; | |
4321 last_old = i; | |
4322 | |
4323 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4324 i = last_new; | |
4325 j = last_old; | |
4326 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4327 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4328 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4329 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4330 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4331 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4332 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
4333 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
4334 --i, --j; | |
4335 last_new = i; | |
4336 last_old = j; | |
4337 | |
4338 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4339 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4340 return 0; | |
4341 | |
4342 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
4343 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4344 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4345 | |
4346 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
4347 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
4348 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
4349 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
4350 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
4351 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
4352 | |
4353 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
4354 do \ | |
4355 { \ | |
4356 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
4357 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
4358 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
4359 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
4360 sym = sym->next; \ | |
4361 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
4362 { \ | |
4363 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
4364 sym->row = row_; \ | |
4365 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
4366 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
4367 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
4368 } \ | |
4369 } \ | |
4370 while (0) | |
4371 | |
4372 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4373 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
4374 { | |
4375 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4376 { | |
4377 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
4378 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4379 ++sym->old_uses; | |
4380 } | |
4381 else | |
4382 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
4383 } | |
4384 | |
4385 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4386 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4387 { | |
4388 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4389 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4390 ++sym->new_uses; | |
4391 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4392 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
4393 } | |
4394 | |
4395 #undef ADDSYM | |
4396 | |
4397 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
4398 height of copied areas. */ | |
4399 nruns = 0; | |
4400 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
4401 | |
4402 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4403 in both matrices. */ | |
4404 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
4405 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
4406 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
4407 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
4408 { | |
4409 int j, k; | |
4410 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
4411 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
4412 | |
4413 /* Record move. */ | |
4414 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4415 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4416 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4417 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4418 run->nrows = 1; | |
4419 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4420 | |
4421 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4422 j = i - 1; | |
4423 k = new_line - 1; | |
4424 while (j > first_old | |
4425 && k > first_new | |
4426 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4427 { | |
4428 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4429 --run->current_vpos; | |
4430 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4431 ++run->nrows; | |
4432 run->height += h; | |
4433 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4434 run->current_y -= h; | |
4435 --j, --k; | |
4436 } | |
4437 | |
4438 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4439 j = i + 1; | |
4440 k = new_line + 1; | |
4441 while (j < last_old | |
4442 && k < last_new | |
4443 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4444 { | |
4445 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4446 ++run->nrows; | |
4447 run->height += h; | |
4448 ++j, ++k; | |
4449 } | |
4450 | |
4451 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4452 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4453 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4454 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4455 case. */ | |
4456 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4457 ; | |
4458 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4459 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4460 runs[j] = run; | |
4461 ++nruns; | |
4462 | |
4463 i += run->nrows; | |
4464 } | |
4465 else | |
4466 ++i; | |
4467 | |
4468 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4469 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4470 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4471 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4472 | |
4473 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4474 | A | | B | | |
4475 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4476 | B | | A | | |
4477 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4478 | |
4479 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4480 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4481 | |
4482 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4483 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4484 { | |
4485 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4486 | |
4487 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4488 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4489 { | |
4490 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4491 | |
4492 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4493 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4494 { | |
4495 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4496 | |
4497 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4498 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4499 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4500 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4501 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4502 p->nrows = 0; | |
4503 } | |
4504 } | |
4505 | |
4506 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4507 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4508 { | |
4509 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4510 int to_overlapped_p; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4511 |
25012 | 4512 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4513 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4514 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
4515 assign_row (to, from); | |
4516 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4517 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4518 } |
4519 } | |
4520 | |
4521 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
4522 return 1; | |
4523 } | |
4524 | |
4525 | |
4526 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
4527 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
4528 | |
4529 void | |
4530 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
4531 struct window *w; | |
4532 int on_p; | |
4533 { | |
4534 while (w) | |
4535 { | |
4536 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
4537 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
4538 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
4539 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
4540 else | |
4541 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
4542 | |
4543 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
4544 } | |
4545 } | |
4546 | |
4547 | |
4548 | |
4549 /************************************************************************ | |
4550 Frame-Based Updates | |
4551 ************************************************************************/ | |
4552 | |
4553 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4554 | |
4555 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4556 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4557 should not be tried. | |
4558 | |
4559 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4560 | |
4561 static int | |
4562 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4563 struct frame *f; | |
4564 int force_p; | |
4565 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4566 { | |
4567 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4568 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4569 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4570 int i; | |
314 | 4571 int pause; |
4572 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4573 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4574 |
4575 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4576 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4577 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4578 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4579 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4580 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4581 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4582 |
314 | 4583 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4584 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4585 { |
4586 pause = 1; | |
4587 goto do_pause; | |
4588 } | |
4589 | |
764 | 4590 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4591 |
25012 | 4592 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4593 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4594 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4595 |
493 | 4596 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4597 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4598 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4599 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4600 break; |
4601 | |
4602 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4603 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4604 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4605 |
4606 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4607 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4608 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4609 | |
4610 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4611 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4612 { |
25012 | 4613 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4614 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4615 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4616 { |
4617 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4618 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4619 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4620 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4621 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4622 if (outq > 900 | |
4623 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4624 { | |
4625 fflush (stdout); | |
4626 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4627 { | |
554 | 4628 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4629 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4630 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4631 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4632 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4633 #endif | |
4634 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4635 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4636 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4637 } |
4638 } | |
4639 } | |
4640 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4641 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4642 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4643 |
25012 | 4644 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4645 } |
4646 } | |
25012 | 4647 |
764 | 4648 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4649 |
4650 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4651 if (!pause) | |
4652 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4653 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4654 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4655 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4656 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4657 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4658 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4659 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4660 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4661 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4662 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4663 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4664 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4665 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4666 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4667 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4668 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4669 { |
25012 | 4670 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4671 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4672 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4673 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4674 } |
708 | 4675 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4676 { |
25012 | 4677 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4678 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4679 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4680 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4681 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4682 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4683 { |
25012 | 4684 --row; |
4685 col = 0; | |
4686 | |
4687 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4688 { | |
4689 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4690 must be ignored here. */ | |
4691 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4692 row); | |
4693 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4694 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4695 | |
4696 while (last > start | |
4697 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4698 --last; | |
4699 | |
4700 col = last - start; | |
4701 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4702 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4703 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4704 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4705 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4706 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4707 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4708 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4709 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4710 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4711 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4712 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4713 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4714 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4715 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4716 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4717 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4718 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4719 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4720 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4721 } |
314 | 4722 else |
25012 | 4723 { |
4724 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4725 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4726 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
29687
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4727 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0 |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4728 /* The cursor vpos may be temporarily out of bounds |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4729 in the following situation: There is one window, |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4730 with the cursor in the lower half of it. The window |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4731 is split, and a message causes a redisplay before |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4732 a new cursor position has been computed. */ |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4733 && w->cursor.vpos < XFASTINT (w->height)) |
25012 | 4734 { |
4735 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4736 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4737 | |
4738 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4739 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4740 | |
4741 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4742 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4743 } | |
4744 } | |
314 | 4745 } |
4746 | |
764 | 4747 update_end (f); |
314 | 4748 |
4749 if (termscript) | |
4750 fflush (termscript); | |
4751 fflush (stdout); | |
4752 | |
4753 do_pause: | |
4754 | |
4755 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4756 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4757 return pause; |
4758 } | |
4759 | |
25012 | 4760 |
4761 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4762 |
21514 | 4763 int |
764 | 4764 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4765 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4766 { |
4767 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4768 int window_size; | |
4769 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4770 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4771 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4772 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4773 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4774 register int i; |
764 | 4775 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4776 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4777 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4778 | |
4779 if (!current_matrix) | |
4780 abort (); | |
4781 | |
4782 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4783 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4784 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4785 changed_lines = 0; |
4786 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4787 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4788 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4789 { |
4790 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4791 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4792 return 0; |
25012 | 4793 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4794 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4795 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4796 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4797 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4798 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4799 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4800 } |
314 | 4801 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4802 { |
25012 | 4803 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4804 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4805 } |
314 | 4806 |
4807 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4808 { | |
4809 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4810 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4811 } |
4812 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4813 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4814 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4815 } |
4816 | |
4817 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4818 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4819 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4820 return 1; |
4821 | |
764 | 4822 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4823 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4824 | |
4825 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4826 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4827 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4828 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4829 | |
4830 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4831 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4832 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4833 && (window_size >= |
4834 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4835 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4836 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4837 return 0; | |
4838 | |
25012 | 4839 if (window_size < 2) |
4840 return 0; | |
4841 | |
764 | 4842 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4843 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4844 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4845 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4846 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4847 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4848 | |
4849 return 0; | |
4850 } | |
25012 | 4851 |
4852 | |
4853 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4854 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4855 | |
4856 static int | |
4857 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4858 struct glyph *r; | |
4859 int len; | |
314 | 4860 { |
25012 | 4861 int i; |
4862 | |
4863 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4864 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4865 break; | |
4866 | |
4867 return i; | |
314 | 4868 } |
25012 | 4869 |
4870 | |
4871 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4872 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4873 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4874 |
4875 static int | |
25012 | 4876 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4877 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4878 { |
25012 | 4879 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4880 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4881 | |
4882 while (p1 < end1 | |
4883 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
4884 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 4885 ++p1, ++p2; |
4886 | |
4887 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4888 } |
4889 | |
25012 | 4890 |
314 | 4891 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4892 |
314 | 4893 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4894 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 4895 |
25012 | 4896 |
4897 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
4898 | |
314 | 4899 static void |
25012 | 4900 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
4901 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 4902 int vpos; |
4903 { | |
25012 | 4904 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 4905 int tem; |
4906 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 4907 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4908 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4909 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4910 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
4911 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
4912 | |
4913 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
4914 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 4915 { |
25012 | 4916 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
4917 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
4918 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 4919 } |
4920 else | |
25012 | 4921 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
4922 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4923 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4924 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 4925 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
4926 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 4927 { |
25012 | 4928 obody = 0; |
314 | 4929 olen = 0; |
4930 } | |
4931 else | |
4932 { | |
25012 | 4933 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
4934 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4935 | |
4936 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 4937 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4938 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 4939 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 4940 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 4941 olen--; |
4942 } | |
4943 else | |
4944 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4945 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4946 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4947 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 4948 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
4949 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4950 } |
4951 } | |
4952 | |
25012 | 4953 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4954 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4955 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
4956 | |
4957 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
4958 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 4959 { |
4960 nlen = 0; | |
4961 goto just_erase; | |
4962 } | |
4963 | |
25012 | 4964 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
4965 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4966 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
4967 | |
4968 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
4969 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
4970 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4971 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4972 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4973 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4974 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4975 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4976 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4977 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4978 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4979 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4980 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4981 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4982 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4983 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4984 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4985 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4986 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4987 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4988 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4989 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4990 } |
28682
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4991 else |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4992 /* Make sure we are in the right row, otherwise cursor movement |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4993 with cmgoto might use `ch' in the wrong row. */ |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4994 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4995 |
25012 | 4996 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
4997 return; | |
4998 } | |
314 | 4999 |
5000 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
5001 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 5002 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 5003 { |
5004 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 5005 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 5006 nlen--; |
5007 } | |
5008 else | |
5009 { | |
25012 | 5010 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
5011 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
5012 all the way across. */ | |
5013 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
5014 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5015 } |
5016 | |
5017 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
5018 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
5019 { | |
25012 | 5020 int i, j; |
5021 | |
5022 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5023 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5024 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5025 { | |
25012 | 5026 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5027 { |
25012 | 5028 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5029 j = i + 1; | |
5030 while (j < nlen | |
5031 && (j >= olen | |
5032 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5033 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5034 ++j; | |
5035 | |
5036 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5037 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5038 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5039 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5040 |
5041 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5042 } | |
5043 } | |
5044 | |
5045 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5046 if (olen > nlen) | |
5047 { | |
5048 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5049 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5050 } | |
5051 | |
25012 | 5052 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5053 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5054 return; |
5055 } | |
5056 | |
25012 | 5057 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5058 characters in a row. */ | |
5059 | |
314 | 5060 if (!olen) |
5061 { | |
25012 | 5062 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5063 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
5064 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
5065 nsp = 0; | |
5066 else | |
5067 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5068 | |
314 | 5069 if (nlen > nsp) |
5070 { | |
5071 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5072 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5073 } | |
5074 | |
764 | 5075 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5076 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5077 return; |
5078 } | |
5079 | |
5080 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5081 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
5082 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5083 | |
5084 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5085 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5086 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5087 |
5088 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5089 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
5090 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
5091 { | |
5092 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5093 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5094 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5095 } |
5096 | |
5097 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5098 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5099 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5100 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5101 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5102 | |
5103 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5104 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5105 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5106 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5107 while (op1 > op2 |
5108 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5109 { |
5110 op1--; | |
5111 np1--; | |
5112 } | |
5113 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5114 | |
5115 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5116 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5117 Is it worth it? */ | |
5118 | |
5119 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5120 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5121 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5122 endmatch = 0; |
5123 | |
5124 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5125 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5126 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5127 Is it worth it? */ | |
5128 | |
5129 if (nsp != osp | |
5130 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5131 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5132 { |
5133 begmatch = 0; | |
5134 endmatch = 0; | |
5135 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5136 } | |
5137 | |
5138 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5139 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5140 | |
5141 if (osp > nsp) | |
5142 { | |
5143 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5144 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5145 } | |
5146 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5147 { | |
5148 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5149 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5150 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5151 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5152 { | |
5153 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5154 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5155 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5156 } | |
5157 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5158 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5159 } |
5160 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5161 | |
5162 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5163 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5164 { | |
5165 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5166 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5167 { | |
5168 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5169 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5170 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5171 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5172 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5173 olen = 0; |
5174 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5175 } | |
5176 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5177 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5178 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5179 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5180 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5181 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5182 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5183 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5184 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5185 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5186 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5187 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5188 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5189 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5190 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5191 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5192 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5193 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5194 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5195 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5196 olen = nlen; |
5197 } | |
5198 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5199 { | |
5200 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5201 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5202 olen = nlen; | |
5203 } | |
5204 } | |
5205 | |
5206 just_erase: | |
5207 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5208 if (olen > nlen) | |
5209 { | |
5210 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5211 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5212 } | |
5213 | |
764 | 5214 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5215 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5216 } |
25012 | 5217 |
5218 | |
314 | 5219 |
25012 | 5220 /*********************************************************************** |
5221 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5222 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5223 | |
5224 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5225 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5226 boundaries. */ | |
5227 | |
5228 int | |
5229 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5230 struct window *w; | |
5231 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5232 { |
25012 | 5233 struct it it; |
5234 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5235 struct text_pos startp; | |
5236 int left_area_width; | |
5237 | |
5238 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5239 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5240 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5241 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5242 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5243 | |
5244 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5245 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5246 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5247 | |
5248 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5249 *y = it.current_y; | |
5250 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5251 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5252 } | |
5253 | |
5254 | |
5255 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5256 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5257 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5258 the string returned. */ | |
5259 | |
5260 Lisp_Object | |
5261 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5262 struct window *w; | |
5263 int x, y; | |
5264 int *charpos; | |
5265 { | |
5266 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5267 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5268 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5269 int x0; | |
5270 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5271 | |
5272 if (mode_line_p) | |
5273 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5274 else | |
25546 | 5275 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5276 |
5277 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5278 { |
25012 | 5279 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5280 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5281 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5282 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5283 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5284 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5285 |
5286 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5287 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5288 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5289 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5290 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5291 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5292 { | |
5293 string = glyph->object; | |
5294 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5295 break; | |
5296 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5297 } |
25012 | 5298 |
5299 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5300 } |
25012 | 5301 |
5302 | |
5303 /*********************************************************************** | |
5304 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5305 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5306 |
5307 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5308 |
493 | 5309 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5310 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5311 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5312 { |
5313 int width, height; | |
5314 extern int errno; | |
5315 int old_errno = errno; | |
5316 | |
764 | 5317 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5318 |
764 | 5319 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5320 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5321 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5322 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5323 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5324 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5325 | |
5326 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5327 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5328 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5329 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5330 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5331 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5332 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5333 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5334 break; |
5335 } | |
5336 } | |
5337 } | |
5338 | |
5339 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5340 errno = old_errno; | |
5341 } | |
5342 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5343 | |
5344 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5345 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5346 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5347 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5348 |
21514 | 5349 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5350 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5351 int safe; |
314 | 5352 { |
5353 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5354 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5355 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5356 |
314 | 5357 while (delayed_size_change) |
5358 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5359 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5360 |
5361 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5362 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5363 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5364 { |
25012 | 5365 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5366 |
764 | 5367 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5368 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5369 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5370 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5371 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5372 } |
5373 } | |
5374 } | |
5375 | |
5376 | |
764 | 5377 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5378 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5379 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5380 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5381 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5382 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5383 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5384 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5385 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5386 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5387 |
21514 | 5388 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5389 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5390 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5391 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5392 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5393 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5394 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5395 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5396 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5397 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5398 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5399 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5400 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5401 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5402 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5403 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5404 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5405 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5406 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5407 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5408 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5409 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5410 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5411 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5412 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5413 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5414 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5415 |
314 | 5416 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5417 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5418 { |
25012 | 5419 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5420 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5421 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5422 return; | |
5423 } | |
5424 | |
764 | 5425 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5426 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5427 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5428 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5429 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5430 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5431 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5432 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5433 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5434 | |
5435 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5436 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5437 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5438 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5439 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5440 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5441 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5442 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5443 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5444 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5445 return; |
5446 | |
15078 | 5447 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5448 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5449 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5450 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5451 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5452 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5453 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5454 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5455 |
25012 | 5456 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5457 { |
25012 | 5458 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5459 { |
25012 | 5460 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5461 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5462 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5463 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5464 (newheight | |
5465 - 1 | |
5466 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5467 0); | |
5468 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5469 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5470 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5471 } |
5472 else | |
764 | 5473 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5474 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5475 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5476 | |
5477 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5478 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5479 } |
5480 | |
25012 | 5481 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5482 { |
25012 | 5483 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5484 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5485 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5486 | |
5487 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5488 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5489 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5490 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5491 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5492 } |
5493 | |
25012 | 5494 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5495 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5496 | |
5497 { | |
5498 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5499 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5500 | |
5501 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5502 &text_area_height); | |
5503 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5504 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5505 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5506 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5507 } | |
5508 | |
5509 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5510 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5511 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5512 |
5513 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5514 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5515 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5516 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5517 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5518 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5519 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5520 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5521 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5522 } |
25012 | 5523 |
5524 | |
314 | 5525 |
25012 | 5526 /*********************************************************************** |
5527 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5528 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5529 | |
5530 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5531 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5532 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5533 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5534 (file) | |
5535 Lisp_Object file; | |
5536 { | |
5537 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5538 termscript = 0; | |
5539 | |
5540 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5541 { | |
5542 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5543 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5544 if (termscript == 0) | |
5545 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5546 } | |
5547 return Qnil; | |
5548 } | |
5549 | |
5550 | |
314 | 5551 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5552 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5553 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5554 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5555 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5556 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5557 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5558 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5559 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5560 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5561 fflush (stdout); |
5562 if (termscript) | |
5563 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5564 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5565 termscript); |
314 | 5566 fflush (termscript); |
5567 } | |
5568 return Qnil; | |
5569 } | |
5570 | |
25012 | 5571 |
314 | 5572 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5573 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5574 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5575 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5576 (arg) | |
5577 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5578 { | |
493 | 5579 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5580 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5581 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5582 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5583 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5584 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5585 fflush (stdout); |
5586 } | |
5587 else | |
5588 bitch_at_user (); | |
5589 | |
5590 return Qnil; | |
5591 } | |
5592 | |
21514 | 5593 void |
314 | 5594 bitch_at_user () |
5595 { | |
5596 if (noninteractive) | |
5597 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5598 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5599 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5600 else | |
5601 ring_bell (); | |
5602 fflush (stdout); | |
5603 } | |
5604 | |
25012 | 5605 |
5606 | |
5607 /*********************************************************************** | |
5608 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5609 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5610 | |
314 | 5611 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5612 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5613 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5614 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5615 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5616 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5617 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5618 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5619 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5620 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5621 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5622 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5623 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5624 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5625 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5626 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5627 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5628 | |
5629 { | |
5630 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5631 sec = (int) duration; | |
5632 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5633 } | |
314 | 5634 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5635 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5636 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5637 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5638 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5639 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5640 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5641 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5642 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5643 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5644 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5645 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5646 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5647 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5648 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5649 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5650 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5651 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5652 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5653 return Qnil; |
5654 | |
650 | 5655 { |
5656 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5657 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5658 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5659 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5660 } | |
587 | 5661 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5662 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5663 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5664 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5665 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5666 immediate_quit = 1; |
5667 QUIT; | |
5668 | |
5669 #ifdef VMS | |
5670 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5671 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5672 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5673 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5674 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5675 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5676 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5677 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5678 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5679 |
314 | 5680 while (1) |
5681 { | |
554 | 5682 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5683 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5684 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5685 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5686 break; |
5687 } | |
5688 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5689 sleep (sec); | |
5690 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5691 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5692 | |
5693 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5694 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5695 | |
5696 return Qnil; | |
5697 } | |
5698 | |
25012 | 5699 |
650 | 5700 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5701 it does the redisplay. | |
5702 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5703 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5704 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5705 |
5706 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5707 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5708 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5709 { |
650 | 5710 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5711 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5712 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5713 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5714 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5715 return Qnil; |
650 | 5716 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5717 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5718 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5719 | |
673 | 5720 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5721 return Qt; | |
5722 | |
314 | 5723 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5724 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5725 #endif |
5726 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5727 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5728 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5729 | |
314 | 5730 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5731 } | |
5732 | |
25012 | 5733 |
650 | 5734 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5735 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5736 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5737 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5738 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5739 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5740 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5741 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5742 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5743 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5744 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5745 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5746 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5747 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5748 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5749 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5750 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5751 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5752 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5753 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5754 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5755 | |
5756 { | |
5757 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5758 sec = (int) duration; | |
5759 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5760 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5761 |
650 | 5762 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5763 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5764 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5765 #endif |
5766 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5767 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5768 } |
25012 | 5769 |
5770 | |
314 | 5771 |
25012 | 5772 /*********************************************************************** |
5773 Other Lisp Functions | |
5774 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5775 | |
5776 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5777 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5778 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5779 add length checks). */ | |
5780 | |
5781 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5782 | |
5783 | |
5784 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5785 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5786 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5787 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5788 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5789 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5790 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5791 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5792 the current state.\n") | |
5793 () | |
5794 { | |
5795 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5796 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5797 int n; | |
5798 | |
5799 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5800 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5801 { | |
5802 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5803 goto changed; | |
5804 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5805 goto changed; | |
5806 } | |
5807 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5808 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5809 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5810 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5811 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5812 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5813 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5814 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5815 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5816 continue; | |
5817 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5818 goto changed; | |
5819 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5820 goto changed; | |
5821 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5822 goto changed; | |
5823 } | |
5824 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5825 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5826 return Qnil; | |
5827 changed: | |
5828 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5829 n = 1; | |
5830 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5831 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5832 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5833 n += 3; |
5834 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5835 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5836 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5837 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5838 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5839 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5840 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5841 { | |
5842 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5843 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5844 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5845 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5846 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5847 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5848 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5849 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5850 continue; | |
5851 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5852 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5853 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5854 } | |
5855 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5856 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5857 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5858 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5859 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5860 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5861 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5862 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5863 abort (); | |
5864 return Qt; | |
5865 } | |
5866 | |
5867 | |
5868 | |
5869 /*********************************************************************** | |
5870 Initialization | |
5871 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5872 | |
314 | 5873 char *terminal_type; |
5874 | |
25012 | 5875 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5876 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5877 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5878 |
21514 | 5879 void |
314 | 5880 init_display () |
5881 { | |
5882 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5883 extern int display_arg; | |
5884 #endif | |
5885 | |
25012 | 5886 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5887 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5888 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5889 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5890 | |
314 | 5891 meta_key = 0; |
5892 inverse_video = 0; | |
5893 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
5894 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
5895 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5896 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5897 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5898 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 5899 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5900 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5901 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5902 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5903 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5904 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5905 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5906 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 5907 |
5908 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5909 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5910 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5911 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5912 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5913 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5914 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5915 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5916 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5917 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5918 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 5919 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5920 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5921 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5922 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5923 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5924 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5925 ) |
314 | 5926 { |
5927 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
5928 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
5929 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
5930 #else | |
5931 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
5932 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5933 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5934 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 5935 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5936 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5937 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5938 #endif |
25012 | 5939 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 5940 return; |
5941 } | |
5942 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
5943 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5944 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5945 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5946 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5947 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5948 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 5949 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5950 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5951 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5952 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5953 |
314 | 5954 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
5955 if (! isatty (0)) | |
5956 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5957 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 5958 exit (1); |
5959 } | |
5960 | |
5961 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
5962 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
5963 if (!terminal_type) | |
5964 { | |
5965 #ifdef VMS | |
5966 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
5967 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
5968 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
5969 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
5970 #else | |
5971 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
5972 #endif | |
5973 exit (1); | |
5974 } | |
5975 | |
5976 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 5977 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 5978 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
5979 { | |
5980 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
5981 char *p; | |
5982 | |
5983 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
5984 | |
5985 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
5986 if (isupper (*p)) | |
5987 *p = tolower (*p); | |
5988 | |
5989 terminal_type = new; | |
5990 } | |
25012 | 5991 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 5992 |
5993 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 5994 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5995 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5996 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5997 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5998 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5999 |
25012 | 6000 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
6001 | |
6002 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
6003 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
6004 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6005 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6006 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6007 |
25012 | 6008 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6009 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 6010 |
6011 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
6012 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6013 if (initialized) | |
6014 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
6015 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
6016 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 6017 |
6018 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
6019 if (initialized | |
6020 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6021 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6022 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6023 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6024 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6025 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6026 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6027 #endif |
25012 | 6028 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6029 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6030 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6031 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6032 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6033 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6034 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6035 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6036 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6037 } |
314 | 6038 } |
25012 | 6039 |
6040 | |
314 | 6041 |
25012 | 6042 /*********************************************************************** |
6043 Blinking cursor | |
6044 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6045 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6046 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6047 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6048 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6049 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6050 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6051 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6052 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6053 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6054 { |
6055 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6056 output routines. */ | |
6057 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6058 { | |
6059 if (NILP (window)) | |
6060 window = selected_window; | |
6061 else | |
6062 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6063 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6064 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6065 } |
6066 | |
6067 return Qnil; | |
6068 } | |
6069 | |
6070 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6071 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6072 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6073 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6074 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6075 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6076 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6077 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6078 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6079 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6080 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6081 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6082 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6083 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6084 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6085 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6086 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6087 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6088 |
25012 | 6089 |
6090 /*********************************************************************** | |
6091 Initialization | |
6092 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6093 | |
21514 | 6094 void |
314 | 6095 syms_of_display () |
6096 { | |
764 | 6097 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6098 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6099 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6100 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6101 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6102 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6103 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6104 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6105 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6106 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6107 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6108 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6109 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6110 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6111 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6112 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6113 |
314 | 6114 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6115 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6116 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6117 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6118 |
314 | 6119 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6120 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6121 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6122 |
314 | 6123 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6124 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6125 |
314 | 6126 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6127 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6128 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6129 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6130 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6131 |
314 | 6132 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6133 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6134 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6135 |
314 | 6136 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6137 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6138 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6139 |
314 | 6140 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6141 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6142 |
314 | 6143 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6144 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6145 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6146 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6147 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6148 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6149 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6150 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6151 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6152 | |
6153 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6154 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6155 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6156 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6157 | |
25012 | 6158 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6159 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6160 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6161 | |
314 | 6162 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6163 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6164 if (noninteractive) | |
6165 #endif | |
6166 { | |
6167 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6168 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6169 } | |
6170 } |